Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally.

2 .

electrical panels. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and piping.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. such as duct. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical. fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. and plumbing engineering workflows. Add basic MEP elements. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Germany. such as mechanical equipment. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and plumbing fixtures. 3 . How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format.

However. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Create detail views. So. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Contact your CAD manager for more information. when you add ductwork. When you install the training files as instructed. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. For example. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Create schedules. annotations. your Training folder may be in a different location. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and sheets to document the project. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. such as templates and families. however. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. NOTE Depending on your installation. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. After completing each exercise. On the Contents tab. you learn where the training files are located. is located and accessed in the training files location. When you open a training file. You do not design entire systems. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. and tags. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. you can choose to save your work. as well as how to open and save them. Metric: files for users working with metric units. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. templates. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. In this exercise. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. For example. to provide a richer and more finished design. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Metric file names have an _m suffix. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. views.

You may close the file with or without saving changes. 3 In the right pane. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. the Open dialog displays. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Imperial or Metric. and click the Training Files icon. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 8 If you have made changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. and you can open any supported file type.rvt) is selected. and click Save. enter the new file name. For Files of type. a list of file types displays. Accessing Training Files | 5 . scroll down. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. and click Open. you are prompted to save the changes. verify that Project Files (*. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. click ➤ Save As.rvt and make changes. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. For example. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 4 Click the training file name. if you open settings.rvt. For File name.

6 .

As you work in drawing and schedule views. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is one of association or connection. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In this case. and phases when you need it. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. If the length of the elevation is changed.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. drawing sheets. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. schedules. hence. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. the hierarchy of elements. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. scope. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and plans. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. ■ ■ 7 . 2D and 3D view. quantities. If you move the partition. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. every drawing sheet. the operation of the software is parametric. drawings. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. You learn the terminology. sections. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In the Revit MEP model.

boilers. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Examples include detail lines. dimensions. and keynotes are annotation elements. boilers. ducts. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. They help to describe or document the design. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. sinks. tags. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. sprinklers. grids. filled regions. For example. tags. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. sprinklers. Datum elements help to define project context. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. levels. For example. sinks. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. and electrical panels. and reference planes are datum elements. ducts. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. walls and ceilings are hosts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. When you change something. They display in relevant views of the design. and electrical panels. and 2D detail components. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. dimensions.

views of the project. section views. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. floors. North . you must be in a section or elevation view. For example. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. programming is not required. Most often. top of wall. or bottom of foundation. In other cases. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you can explicitly control them. from geometry to construction data. such as roofs. for example. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. To place levels. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . they are implied by what you do and how you draw. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. and so forth).Elevation View Element: When creating a project. schedules. If you can draw. The project file contains all information for the building design. families. elevation views. first floor. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you do nothing to establish these relationships. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. By using a single project file. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. This information includes components used to design the model. and ceilings. Project: In Revit MEP. and drawings of the design. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. and types. Often. However. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. In Revit MEP.

They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Type: Each family can have several types. such as a 30” X 42” title block. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A type can also be a style. or layer the views to see only the one on top.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can also display several project views at one time. identical use. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. hiding. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. showing. pipes. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. For example. each in-place family contains only a single type. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and similar graphical representation. Then experiment with them. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include ducts. Unlike system and standard component families. However. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. and wires. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. For example. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families can be transferred between projects. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. With a few clicks. For example. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. A type can be a specific size of a family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work.

To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To return the panel to the ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop.

data and systems. When working on the Modify tab. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. select the tool first.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed.. project and system parameters.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and for switching views. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and settings. architect-specific tools. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and CAD files. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. then select what you want to modify.

an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. To keep a panel expanded. For example. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays frequently used tools. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. provides access to common tools. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . By default. closes the application menu (double-click). provides requested information.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). when adding duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.

click. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.... select a template and create a new drawing. such as Export and Publish. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Export) On the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save As) export the current drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a file to open.

click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . annotation. annotation. family.. family... or template file. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. Camera. saves a current project. but is not enabled by default. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. click. (Print) access product and license information. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. to. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. provides views including Default 3D. and Walkthrough. (Licensing) close the file.On the application menu. (Publish) print the current drawing. publish the current project. To enable or disable a tool item. or template file.

When you are using a command. Clear the Status Bar check mark. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. This displays the command history in a list. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. repeat the command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. check the Status Bar. Modify. However. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. In addition. Group. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). To hide the Status Bar. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. when you switch to another editing mode. To show the Status Bar again. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or the Family Editor. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. workshared components. Starting with the most recent command. Clipboard. displaying the same information. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view.To undo or redo a series of operations. When you are highlighting an element or component.

Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. To change existing elements to a different type. When you place an element in a drawing. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool.To cancel or exit the current command. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. click (Modify). select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. On the Quick Access toolbar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. for example. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar.

18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. 1 Click ➤ Open. Zoom the view In the tutorials.rvt. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. In the following steps. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.

and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. this is referred to as a crossing selection. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 9 To display SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. In the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the Navigation bar. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click . Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE As you zoom in and out. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Modifying the View | 19 . 6 Click in the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command.

and click tin the Options dialog. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. moving the wheel to the desired location. ➤ Options. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. and then using the Zoom tool again. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. press ESC. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. For more information about SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. As you move the mouse. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.

bottoms. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Small blue dots. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Similar controls. These are the drag controls.Design. as shown. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. display along the ends. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you are familiar with these tasks. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the duct. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. called drag controls.HVAC Plan . and open Level 2 . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. referred to as shape handles. 2 Enter ZR.

Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.3 Click and drag the bottom control. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. In this example. All changes you make to a project are tracked. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Move. 6 On the Undo menu.

9 Click the midpoint of the duct. such as Move and Copy. In this case. 11 With the duct already selected. require 2 clicks to complete the command.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. for example. and drag it to the left as shown. After selecting the element to move. Some commands. as shown. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. 10 Move the cursor to the right. The duct is moved to the new position. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position.

such as the Modify Ducts command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Return. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Press ESC twice. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Click OK.End a command Some commands. 14 Enter VG. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. For example. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.Supply. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 13 To end a command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

New projects inherit all the families. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. and click Open. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. In that case. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 2 In the New Project dialog. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. create and manage views. select Project.rte template. You can either select a template from the template library. click Training files. and modify system settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 27 . link files. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. such as coordination review and interference checking. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. under Template file. 6 Click OK. You can choose from several templates. Finally. click Browse. you learn how to start a project from a template. and geometry from the starting template. under Create new. 5 In the New Project dialog. system families. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. the default building levels and standard views. such as the default project units and settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. use copy/monitor. and loadable families.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as ducts and pipes. settings.

click (Browse). For example. select Manchester. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. select Level 1. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. under Energy Analysis. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. (Browse). 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. navigate to Imperial Templates. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. ■ For Building Construction. create another new project using the Construction template. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial.7 In the Project Browser. for City. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ■ ■ Under Create new. review the construction materials listed. Click Cancel. If you want to use a template other than the default. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). you can establish settings that are common to most projects. for Energy Data. and open North. Click OK. select Project template. click Browse. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In the Choose Template dialog. 8 In the drawing area. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. you can select it now. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. For Location. click Edit. 10 Using the same method. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. select School or University.rte template and click Open. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. NH. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK twice. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. When you select the material. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file.

Creating an MEP Project | 29 . under Duct Settings. under Pipe Settings. For Categories. 22 In the right pane.rfa and click Open. 24 In the right pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. and 5 1/2". Holding CTRL. and demand factors for electrical systems. 10 1/2". select Identity Data. click Sizes. click Round. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 4 1/2". piping. 26 In the right pane. Click OK twice. 4 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and 12 1/2". 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 33 Click OK.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. power distribution systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 27 Click OK. 23 In the left pane. for 3 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 25 In the left pane. wiring. 5 1/2". click Rectangular. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Views. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 3/4". For Ground Wire Tick Mark.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Wiring. under Duct Settings. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. and fire protection systems. for 3 1/2". Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. plumbing. 11 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization.

35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. For Then by. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 5 Click OK. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and groups that are contained in a project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 38 Close the file. select Family and Type. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. click Training. To enable this coordination. Linking Projects In this exercise. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. under Create new. families. For Sort by. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select View Name. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. Select Ascending Click OK twice. You need to create the MEP model for the project. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Sub-Discipline. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. select Project. Click Open. In addition. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Associated Level. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. under Template file. From the Positioning list.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. click Browse. select Auto . You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects.Origin to Origin. sheets. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and Import dialogs. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog.11 In the Places dialog. and click OK twice. ➤ Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click Open. Load. templates. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save. click My Library. 15 Under Library Name. click the My Library icon. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. or families. and change the name to My Library. click (Add Value). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and select it as the library path. and click (Browse).

13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. view the current path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 27 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 11 In the Options dialog. click Places. 9 In the text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. click the Spelling tab. select Ignore words in uppercase. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 12 Create a new project using the default template. such as bump maps. click Edit. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the Options dialog. If you work in a large office. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 Under Settings. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. If you want to relocate this path. This path is determined during installation. 22 Select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. specify the new location here. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 20 Click ➤ Options. custom color files. 19 Click Cancel. 5 In the text editor. click OK. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 21 On the File Locations tab. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Remove Value) to delete the library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. and decal image files. click Edit. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check.

click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 22 In the text editor.17 In the Spelling dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. 23 In the text editor. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click Browse. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.. 18 Click ➤ Options. and enter 1 . 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. As you zoom in and out within a view. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.rte. click the Spelling tab. click Close. 2 In the New Project dialog. 20 Under Settings. click OK. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 19 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . under Dimension Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click File menu ➤ Save. you modify snap settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 24 In the Options dialog. under Template file. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Edit. work with snapping turned off. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click Restore Defaults. you modify snap increments.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. TIP To zoom while sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 8 In the Snaps dialog. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. click OK. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. snapping reverts to the system default settings. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This is the increment that you added previously. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. If it does not. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. deselect Chain. and move the cursor to the right. enter SM. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. While sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. For example. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. zoom out until it does so. use the wheel button on your mouse. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.7 Under Object Snaps. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. such as ZO to zoom out.

and move the cursor to the right. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 19 Enter SM. the midpoint.. with or without saving it. If you move the cursor along the wall. 26 Close the file. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 25 Click OK. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Do not set the wall end point. it will snap to the endpoints. and the wall edges. 22 Move the cursor downward. and specify the wall endpoint.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. and delete the value 1’ . Notice that snapping is once again active. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the mechanical system. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. and then you create a plenum level. you first plan the system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 45 . you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. At the end of the tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you first configure the linked architectural model. After finishing each exercise. In this exercise. This system consists of a cooling tower. However. you can choose to save your work. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. If the tutorial training files are not present. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. methodology. In this lesson. By following the recommended workflow. After applying a color scheme to the zones. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. go to http://www. you design a mechanical system for an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you will understand the process. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. duct system and a hydronic piping system. water source heat pump (WSHP).autodesk.

under Constraints. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. NOTE When working with a linked file. 1 In the Project Browser. you add a level for plenums. roof. Next. click Training Files. In this section. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. ceilings. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. These components are defined in the architectural training file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Room Bounding. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.rvt. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and after the linked model highlights. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. not in the MEP training file. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click to select it.

7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and in the Plan View Types dialog. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. enter 8'. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.6 In the Project Browser. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 16 Press Esc. For Offset. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 9 On the Draw panel. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.MEP. Click Plan View Types. and double-click West . ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Preparing Spaces | 47 . 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. The new level is placed. and click OK. and enter Level 2 Plenum.

select Design. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. and click Apply Default View Template. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. select MEP .Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . However. In this exercise. and for Offset. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. for Top. NOTE After finishing each exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. enter an Offset of 1' 0". 20 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. ■ Click OK twice.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for View Scale. for Level. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. Under Extents. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Default View Template. For Cut plane.Plenum. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. and then place spaces in various types of areas. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. you can choose to save your work. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. In the next exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Sub-Discipline. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. select Level Above (Level 3). right-click Level 2 Plenum. click Edit. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and click Properties. Under View Depth. you place spaces in areas of the building model. Under Identity Data. select Plenum Plan. right-click Level 2 Plenum. for View Range. For View Classification. enter 0.

enter 0. For Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. walls. select New. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. For Space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.Space Plan is highlighted. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select Horizontal. Placing Spaces | 49 . click Training Files. For Offset. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 2 Plenum. and ceilings). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For (Tag Location).

The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.7 Click to place the space. enter 219. For Name. ensuring coordination between the files. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. for Number. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Click OK. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter Library.

select Level 3. enter 0. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Offset. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 21 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. and then click Modify.

you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis. 23 Click OK. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. and then split the space using a space separation line.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and for Offset. and then press Esc. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .Space Plan is highlighted. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. enter 0. for Upper Limit. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. click Training Files.

10 Using the same method. the plan view would have updated with the changes. In the schedule. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and scroll to the newly placed space. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. enter Corridor. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 11 Close the schedule view.7 In the Project Browser. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 9 In the floor plan. as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. double-click the space name. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. and press Enter. change the space number to 216A. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line.

place a space in the lower area of the split space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 16 Using the method learned previously.15 Press Esc twice.

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i.rvt. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. If necessary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place a space in a chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted.

enter Chase. and click Element Properties. select the space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Upper Limit.4 Press Esc. For Offset. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 225PC. For Number. 12 Click in the section view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. for Upper Limit. In the plan view. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 10 In the plan view. select Roof Level. select Level 3. select Interior and Reference. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 4'. Under Identity Data. right-click. and then click OK. expand Spaces. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. For Limit Offset. enter 0. click in the chase area to place the space. for Name. 6 Enter VG. On the Options Bar.

the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 15 Press Esc. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. All spaces in the view are tagged. ceilings. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Bounding elements (such as walls. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. under Loaded Tags. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 17 Type ZF. floors. select Space Tag With Volume. In the next exercises. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and maximize the view.Space Plan. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.

which removes the space from the Default zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. click View ➤ Zones. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. it is automatically added to the Default zone. In this exercise. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. After a space is placed in an area. click Reference.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. indicating that it’s the active view. To display space reference lines. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and a new zone is created. under Spaces. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Finish Editing Zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. under Energy Analysis. and Electrical 220 spaces. the Edit Zone tab displays. Using the Edit Zone tab. Instruction 221. select Occupiable. click Training Files. indicating that the space is occupiable. double-click 121 Cafeteria. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. select Computer Lab 222. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.5 In the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and modify the zone properties. you assign spaces to a zone.Zoning is highlighted. The Zone tool is active. As you do this. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and verify the zones in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can add or remove a space from the zone. click Reference. To display space reference lines.

5 With the drawing area active. type VG. Expand HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.In the System Browser. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Instruction. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. To view the zone in the drawing area. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). you need to activate the zone visibility. Click OK. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

for Name. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning is highlighted. and verify the zone in the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. click Reference. and click OK. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. click Training Files. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. under Spaces. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.West . 9 In the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.West . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Finish Editing Zone.Area B. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Identity Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. expand 2 . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). enter 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building.Zoning. 11 Close the System Browser. To display space reference lines. You activated zone visibility in the views. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Zoning floor plan.Zoning view to activate it. click in the Level 2 .Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . zoom out. Select Attached End. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Verify that the distance is 1/2".5 Click in the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc.

In this exercise. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.Zoning to make it the active view. double-click Level 1 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. double-click the zone tag. for Name Value.Zoning view. Front. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and zone information. and click OK. click the corner where the Top.rvt. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. on the ViewCube. enter Lounge . click Training Files. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you verify the building.East. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. space. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

verify that Wireframe is selected. click (Isolate). ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. and select 109 Lounge. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Next. you isolate the space. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Click (Highlight). With 109 Lounge selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.

select 1_South_Lounge. Next. select 109 Lounge.■ On the Details tab. select Lounge/Recreation. and then click OK. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. scroll down in the left pane. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. the space information displays for the selected space. and then click OK. For Electrical Loads. and in the People dialog. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and click OK. For People. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. click . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). For Construction Type. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. Below the list of spaces and zones. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Electrical Loads dialog.

heating air temperature. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. This indicates the heating set point. For Heating Information. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that <Building> is selected. This indicates the outdoor air per person. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. and other room-bounding components. verify that 70. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and air changes per hour. For Cooling Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. verify that 74. Below the list of spaces and zones. floors. the zone information displays for the selected zone. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. This indicates the cooling set point. and humidification set point. outdoor air per area. cooling air temperature.00 °F : N/A is specified.00 °F : N/A is specified. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.00 °F : 90. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. 12 Using the methods learned previously. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .00 °F : 54. click (Shading). View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and dehumidification set point. Next. roofs.

Under Energy Analysis. For Offset. open MEP . Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Name. select Plenum. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 212P. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Level 3. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Cancel. Under Energy Analysis. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Plenum. for Number. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Because this is an unoccupied space.

you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and select space Plenum 212P. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NH. you verified building. click in the Value field. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. select School or University. In this exercise. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. under Energy Analysis. On the Place tab. For Location. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. For Postal Code. and verify that the space has replaced the void. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone.Space Plan. double-click Level 2 .rvt. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. is selected. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . enter 03101. for Energy Data. for City. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. verify that Manchester. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and zone information. click Training Files. click Edit.

70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Occupiable is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select Specified. select Heated and cooled. enter 200 Btu/h. Click OK twice. and click OK. For Export Complexity. for Values. Select Area per person. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. and enter 50 sq. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. If. under Volume Computations. For Project Phase. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. a cooling load. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. right-click. verify that <Building> is specified. enter 150 Btu/h. verify that New Construction is selected. For Latent. you need to select this option. click Edit. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. ft. For Building Construction. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Space Type. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. and click OK. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. for Building Service. select Library . for Values. In order to select a space. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 8 In the drawing area. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. click in the Value column. For Ground Plane. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. verify that Level 1 is selected. For People. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. both. or neither. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that 1' 0" is specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and then click .Audio Visual. For Condition Type. For Sensible. select Specified. select space Library 219. ■ On the Weather tab. and click Element Properties.

(Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. select Actual. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Under Power. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. select Actual. and under Heating Information. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK twice. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You have verified the building information. for Values. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. is specified. verify that Manchester. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. You should correct the space error in the building model. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. click Edit. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. NH. Next. select 219 Library. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify that School or University is selected. 12 Click the Details tab. For Location.■ ■ ■ Click OK. for Values. click Calculate. There should be no warnings displayed. Select the space associated with the warning. For Building Construction. and click OK. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. click Information). For Building Service. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and can be modified here. For Electrical Loads. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. click Training Files. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. select 219 Library. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 21 Click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 16 After you review the loads report. click to the right of the building to place the legend. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. In this exercise. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. space. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 17 In the loads report. 15 Review the loads report for project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 19 In the drawing area. and a loads report displays. Click OK. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. or zone information. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and zone information for the building model. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Color Scheme.Space Plan. 3 In the drawing area. or make any changes to the model. select HVAC Zones. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. under Energy Analysis. weather. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. and click OK. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. The new scheme displays in the view. select Tonnage Range. in 1-ton increments. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.5 Zoom in to the legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.

Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values.

Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. select New Construction. For Name. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. more category options are available.12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . select Spaces. for Select available fields from. click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.rvt. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Click OK. In this exercise. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Select Schedule building components. select Spaces. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. enter Space Airflow Schedule. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. For Phase.Space Fill is the active view.

Header. select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Discipline. In the Fields dialog. and Blank line.■ Under Available fields. For Then by. and then click . select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. and click OK. and then click Conditional Format. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. For Type. and then select Hidden field. For Formula. select Number. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Air Flow. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. click (Browse). for Formula. select Level. select Not Between. Select Formula. In the Calculated Value dialog. select HVAC. enter . ■ Click Calculated Value. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Fields. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Airflow Delta. select Airflow Delta. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Click OK. In the Schedule Properties dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Select Ascending.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow.

6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Click OK twice.■ ■ ■ For Value. and click OK. In the Color dialog. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. verify that Show is highlighted. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. ■ The schedule displays. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. For Background Color. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. click the color swatch. In this exercise. Under Conditions to Use. right-click to access schedule properties. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. select red. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson. In later exercises. a view opens that contains the selected space.

78 .

and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you modify air terminal parameters. Then. you will create supply air systems. After system creation. After completing the air systems lesson.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. As you place the air terminals. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. In this lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). 79 . you size ductwork and validate your air system design. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 3 In the ceiling view. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and scroll to space 223. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.

18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. as shown.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. select the diffuser. 9 On the Placement panel. Also.Rectangular Face Round Neck . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 15 On the Options Bar.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. and press Enter. If the host element is modified or moved. type 12. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and then select both Copy and Multiple. the hosted elements are updated as well. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. for Flow. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and select Supply Diffuser . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . enter 425 CFM. The schedule updates with the new flow data. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and then press Esc to end the command. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. verify that Constrain is cleared.

24 In the Open dialog. click Yes. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. as shown. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 25 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 22 In the drawing area. clear Leader. select one of the diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. and click Open.rfa. As you place the return diffusers. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. and then press Esc. Next. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Place on Face. 28 On the Placement tab.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 27 Select Return Diffuser .Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 21 On the Options Bar. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. select each of the 5 supply diffusers.

select Strong Reference. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select one of the return diffusers. click Yes. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click to select the lines. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the alert dialog. Level. and click OK. as shown. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference. under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click the Level 1 line. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. For the start point. enter 9' 0"2750. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . and click OK. for Constraints ➤ Offset. ■ ■ For the end point. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.

This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. and click View ➤ Systems. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Press Esc. including energy analysis. When you highlight a space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. After creating the logical connection. indicating that it’s the active view. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. You then create the logical connection between the system components. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. click Training Files. right-click the title. the space crossing lines display.HVAC Plan . verify that Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. In this exercise.Design is highlighted. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. However.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Connect Into. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. the number of elements is updated. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. On the Options Bar. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. System Name. and Flow value. 12 In the System Browser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 6 Keep the System Browser open.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 11 In the drawing area. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. review the Number of Elements. As you add diffusers to systems. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 15 Click Cancel. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 .

highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Mark.17 Using the method learned previously. under Mechanical. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. Rename the system Next. In this exercise. under Identity Data. which updates the name in the System Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the system connects them. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 22 Click OK. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 18 Click OK. the air terminals are the children. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 25 Click OK. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. for System Name. In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP.

6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. and display solution 1. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. In this case. the space crossing lines display. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 4 In the drawing area. for Solution Type. A Generate Layout tab displays.HVAC Plan. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.rvt. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. Also. select Network. click Training Files. which provides various layout tools. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the Network type provides several solutions. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the upper left diffuser.

select Flex Duct Round : Flex .7 On the Options Bar. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. you’ll get an error in a later step. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Modify. For Offset. For Duct Type. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Flex Duct Type. Select Branch. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Duct Type. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. Click OK. click Settings. as shown.Round. enter 3'. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . enter 9' 10 1/2".

as is the elbow itself. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.11 Click Finish Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. For example. or manually modify the duct. select a different layout solution.

Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. The first time you press Tab. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Using a flow-based color scheme. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. You can delete ductwork and the system remains.Flow. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. select Duct Color Fill . highlight a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and click OK. and equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. thus it is not part of the system. but not all values are used in this view. for Color Scheme. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. for Values Displayed. a disconnection exists. select By View. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. fittings. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Graphics.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. If the entire network does not highlight. and click to select it. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Usually. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. and click OK. select the WSHP. and press Enter. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). select one of the diffusers in the system. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 20 In the drawing area. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend. for Schemes.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.Airflow. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Velocity. for Flow. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and on the Options Bar. under Mechanical .

select Calculated Size Only. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select the upper segment of main duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated. select Friction. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and then click to select it. for Branch Sizing. highlight a segment of the duct. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Under Constraints. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. click Cancel. and enter . and drag it to the right. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Click OK. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and select 16". If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.08 in-wg/100ft. Select Only.

The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. static pressure. pressure. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure loss. Using this tool. Use the information that displays (flow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.

NOTE As you inspect a system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.rvt. 35 Click Finish. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. also known as the critical path. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.

and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select the WSHP.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click Draw Duct.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan .

The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 14 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. for Offset.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .3D MEP. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 11 On the Options Bar. NOTE When drawing duct. select the top right diffuser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. select 9' 10 1/2".8 Press Esc twice to end the command. click the corner where the Top. double-click MEP . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. right-click the connector grip. 15 On the ViewCube. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. Front.

18 Make the floor plan the active view. Also. the color fill indicates the flow value. The ductwork is automatically created.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. in space 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. it is considered a closed loop. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 22 Using the same method.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning.

33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and then click Modify. and click to select it. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 30 Press Esc twice.

verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. for Flow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Using the same method. such as a plenum. under Constraints. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system.Airflow. and click OK. select a segment of the main duct. clear Restrict Height. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Mechanical . and then click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Create return and supply piping systems. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Then. 109 . you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. including 2 base mounted pumps. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. and a cooling tower located on the roof. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Automatically and manually lay out piping.

110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place mechanical equipment.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. on level 3 of the building model.

Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Wall faces is selected.Horizontal . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Design is highlighted. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Left Return . indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . as shown. and select WSHP . 7 On the Options Bar.High Efficiency . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.2-6 Tons . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. in corridor 328.

and in the Type Selector. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.8 Click the corridor wall face. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. as shown. click the top edge of the WSHP. click the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and enter 2'.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.

14 Click Modify. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 9'. Click OK. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . for Water Flow. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Offset. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Mechanical. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. select the 2 WSHPs. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 12 GPM.

The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click Modify. including flow and pressure. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems.

analyses cannot be performed. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can create pipes to connect system components. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Mech 330). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. right-click the Systems column heading. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Unlike logical connections (systems).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. but without a corresponding system. where it is easier to review the information. 5 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Creating a Piping System | 115 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Design is highlighted. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.

You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. As you assign equipment to systems. select the 2 WSHPs. 10 On the Options Bar. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Assigning a system component to an existing system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. and the Edit System tool is not active. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. for System Name. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. select the boiler. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. while pressing Ctrl. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the drawing area. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.In the System Browser. Therefore. Notice that on the Options Bar. This display indicates that the system is selected.

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 19 In the Project Browser. You have created the hydronic return system.HVAC Plan .13 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. double-click Roof . Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. for System Name. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and select the cooling tower. under Design ➤ HVAC . 17 On the Options Bar. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.

In heating mode. In cooling mode. and click Expand All. and click Select. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click OK. 28 Using the same method. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and bypasses the cooling tower.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 25 Select the boiler. 23 Close the roof plan view. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. indicating the logical connection. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 29 Right-click CHWS. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). the boiler supplies heated water to the system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. expand the Hydronic Return system category.

enter 18 GPM. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. for Water Flow. under Mechanical. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Properties. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click OK. expand Piping. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.In the System Browser. you can view several parameters. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. including the flow rate and size of the component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click OK. and click Column Settings. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). and click to select it.Design is highlighted. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . press Tab to highlight the system. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. select CHWR. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 9 In the Select a System dialog. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. click Check None.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . the boiler. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. then the Select a System dialog displays. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. select Mechanical Equipment.rvt. and click OK.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.Mech 330). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. When you draw a box to select components. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. you can place the cursor over a system component. A system preview displays in red. 10 Click OK.

11 On the Options Bar. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. duct. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. or architectural components. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. It does not reference the architecture. For Inset. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. 13 Click Cancel. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. structural beams. select Perimeter. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . verify that Solutions is selected. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. click Settings. enter 1' 6''.

Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 19 In the drawing area. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 17 Optionally. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. and the flow for the other is 12. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. With each Tab. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed.16 Click Finish Layout. and press Tab 3 times. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.

Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical. and click OK. and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and access its instance properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM.

which propagates flow throughout the system. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Next.HVAC Plan . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. On the Options Bar. click Edit System. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 32 Click Finish Editing System. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Number of Elements is now 8. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). double-click Level 1 . Logically. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you physically close the CHWR loop.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view.Design.

and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. under Mechanical. access its instance properties. 38 Using the same method. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). as shown. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click Cancel. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. select a WSHP. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area.

40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 0''/12''. and then click OK. For Slope. For Inset. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click Settings. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 41 Click OK. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. enter 1' 6''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.

48 While pressing Ctrl. 46 Click Modify. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.

To create the piping system. 51 Click Finish Layout. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe).50 Using the same method. or manually modify the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Add piping to close the supply loop. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system.

double-click 3D HVAC Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you work in the training file. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.Design is highlighted. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views.HVAC Plan . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and the return pipes are magenta. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.rvt.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Click to specify the reference point. and press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''.

and click Draw Pipe. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The connections are automatically created. 12 In the 3D view. 13 In the plan view. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and the lower one is secondary. and click OK. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. select the return pipe riser. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the boiler. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In.

the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . enter 1' . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector. enter 2'. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.7''. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.In a plan view. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. and press Enter. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ Move the cursor down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping.

select the primary base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. and click OK. 19 In the plan view. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. as shown. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. As you place piping runs that are close together. 18 Press Esc twice. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the appropriate fittings are created. and select it. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and click Draw Pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. and click the minus symbol. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and when the connector point displays. and click to draw the pipe. 28 Press Esc. you select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.

32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. right-click the discharge connector. enter 4'. for Offset. and click to create the pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 35 Using the method learned previously. as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. these pipe connections were created automatically.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. enter 9' 6''. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. type 1'.

select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system. right-click. Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

50 or 50% of the Flow. as shown. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 43 Press Esc. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 44 In the 3D view. and click OK. notice that under Mechanical. view the properties for the secondary pump. right-click. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. In the Instance Properties dialog. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. The flow is being propagated through the piping. select the cooling tower. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. and click Element Properties. the value is 0 GPM. 42 Click OK. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. When you create the pumps in parallel. 40 Click Cancel. 48 In the plan view. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 41 Using the same method. for Cooling Water Flow. under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.■ Lower pipe (outlet). 49 Press Esc.

Adding Valves In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and close the dialog. select the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler.50 In the 3D View. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). When the valve is open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i.rvt.

3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. The bypass valve is closed by default. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Adding Valves | 143 . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select Ball Valve . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 8 Press Esc twice. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan .

14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.10 Press Esc. place another Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. under Mechanical. right-click. 20 Select the bypass valve. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. Adding Valves | 145 . 19 Using the same method. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. In heating mode. and click Element Properties. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). verify that Flow is 0 GPM. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. and select Ball Valve . and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).

The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.22 Using the method you just learned. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. indicating that it’s the active view. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Initially. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. as shown. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.

Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Flow. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . for Schemes. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. click Pipe Color Fill . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

Under Constraints. for Branch Sizing. and click to select the branch. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.25 FT/100ft. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. select Friction. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. enter 5 FPS. 13 Press Esc. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Select And. Click OK. and for Velocity. and enter 2.

Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. or offset elevations are incorrect. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. click Training Files. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Using the System Inspector. Inspecting the System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. select a different layout solution.rvt. Either relocate the system components.Design ➤ 3D Views. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. Inspecting the System | 149 .IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. pressure. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.

and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. This information helps you modify the system design. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. as required. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.

and click OK.67 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.88 psi. 10 Click Finish. for Fluid Temperature. the Static Pressure is 7. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. select 90° F. targeting those systems that need attention. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.89 psi. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. inspect Section 6 again. as shown. 9 Using the same method.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. In this exercise. and to size pipe. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. you need to validate them.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .

all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and double-click Level 3 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. right-click the Systems titlebar. 6 In the Project Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. As you learned when placing components. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and for pipe sizing.HVAC Plan . and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 7 In the System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Show to view all of the system components. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. the pipe is associated with that system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 9 Right-click CHWS. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the System Browser. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. click Training Files.Design. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and click View.rvt. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 4 In the System Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. For example. After you have assigned all components to systems. Warnings display. double-click Level 1 . expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. After you assign components to a system. If you place components without assigning them to a system. thus assigning the components to a system.Design. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.

11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. and select Level 3 . 13 Right-click CHWR. and confirm unassigned system components. click Close. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 12 In the System Browser. and click Expand All. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. otherwise.HVAC Plan . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.TIP If you have multiple views open. expand the Unassigned folder. 10 Using the same methods.Design floor plan. right-click Hydronic Return. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

click Training Files. expand Wiring . For Temperature. and demand factors that are applied in the design. enter 1. select 75. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ For Factor.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. speeding up the design phase. distribution systems.rvt.04. For Temperature Rating. select Copper. select Wiring Types. ■ Click New Correction Factor. For Material. As you place components and create circuits. wiring. You also add a wiring type. click (Open). enter THHN. Select Correction Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Copper.Wire Sizes. select 90. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. ■ ■ For Material. In this exercise you review electrical settings.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. Click Background Color. select Red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ For Value. Click OK three times. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. for Custom Colors.

Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 167 .Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create power loads. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. power circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. as you place lighting fixtures. First. Then. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.

for Basic Colors. Under Scheme Definition. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.rvt. In the Color dialog.00 fc. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. You can create additional color schemes. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the color legend. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. select Orange. select the color for Less Than 20. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for the Spaces Category.Lighting Color Fill view is open.00 fc. 2 In the drawing area. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select Average Estimated Illumination. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Click OK. By using orange as the color for this range. click (Open).

The red field will clear once the +/. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 8 In the Project Browser.277.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. which is the lowest value in the specified range. zoom to space Library 219.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.5 fc range.5 fc range is satisfied. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 13 Click the Level 2 . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.Lighting Ceiling plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.7 In the Project Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .

19 Press ESC to end the command. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 23 Click OK. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 25 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the fixtures will move accordingly.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 18 Click to place the fixture. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. select Multiple. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.

28 In the drawing area. 30 On the Options Bar. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select the 3 fixtures. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . 36 In the Filter dialog. and for Category.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .277V. click Check None. Click OK.

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . select Multiple Alignment. 42 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.277V.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. you modify the light fixture IES files. click (Open). click Training Files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.45 Press ESC to end the command.rvt. In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 .

2 Tile the views as shown. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. scroll to view space space Library 219.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type.Lighting Plan.Lighting Color Fill plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.

Click OK. specify 15000. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. for Ballast Loss Factor.93. for Color Preset. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. select Xenon and click OK.85.00 VA. Under Photometrics. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Color. for Type Mark. Under Electrical. select 463T5_S. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. for Lamp. enter . select T5 [HO]. Under Identity Data. click the value for Initial Intensity.00 lm. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. and click OK. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . enter .ies and click Open. ■ Click Apply. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. ■ Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.277V and click OK. In the Name dialog. enter F15.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Apparent Load. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. enter 162.

Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None.277V. Click OK. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . 10 In the Filter dialog.

15 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .Press Delete. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Note the lighting delta updates again.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. and receptacles to your design. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click (Open). 19 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. junction boxes. Placing Switches. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Placing Switches. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Junction Boxes. In the next exercise. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. and Receptacles | 183 . you add switches.Press Delete. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Junction Boxes.

5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes . The element type Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 185 . browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.rfa and click Open.

20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 Select the junction box.Offset. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Mark. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. NOTE When entering values. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Under Electrical. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 9’0”.14 Press ESC to end the command. 21 In the drawing area. enter JB-1NL. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. note the Number of Poles is 1. Click Edit Type. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. zoom to space Library 219. Click OK twice. In the Type Properties dialog.

right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. and Number of Elements. 26 In the System Browser. Click OK. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Select Load. Junction Boxes. 23 In the System Browser. and Voltage. right-click and click Column Settings. NOTE If necessary.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Select Size. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 24 For any column. Expand General. Space Number. Space Name. Distribution System. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 187 . 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

rvt. click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. 2 In the drawing area. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).equipment. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

enter 20. For Panel Name. enter PP-2B.Surface: 100A. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. Click OK. 8 Select the panelboard. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Max. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 120/208 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 14 Select the panelboard. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .Loads. 9 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye.

select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. enter LP-2B. zoom to space Instruction 221. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click Check None. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. #1 Pole Breakers. For Panel Name. Click OK. which is the logical connection between the elements. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.Loads. 20 In the drawing area. and for Category. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 20. for Max.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

32 Press ESC. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.28 Press ESC to end the command.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

click Check None.Loads.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. enter 2. Click OK. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. and for Category. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. except without wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. for Hot Conductors. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Wires. 41 In the Filter dialog. 38 Press ESC to end the command. Click OK.

10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Voltage. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. right-click on the Systems heading.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. and verify that Load. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Rating. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Click OK. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. click Training Files. and then expand circuit 1. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel.rvt. 13 In the System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. Distribution System. expand Power. Expand Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings.

28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 With the junction box still selected. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 30 Close the System Browser.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. change the Voltage to 277V. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Click OK. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit.

35 Press ESC to end the command. click below the first one to place it. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 40 Click OK twice. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Tags. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. under Identity Data. for Type Mark. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. note the label parameters and click Cancel. enter FR4. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 47 In the drawing area. click Edit Type. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click Yes. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Click OK.

57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Next you create a switch system. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixture Tags. For Circuit Number. click Check None. 52 In the Save As dialog.rfa. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Break. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 56 In the Filter dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. and click Apply. enter a comma. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click OK. Deselect Break and for Suffix. and for Category. for File Name. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click Save.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label .

12 Select the occupancy sensor. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. click (Open).Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. for Switch ID. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID.rvt. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Creating a Switch System | 205 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. under Electrical Lighting. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Lighting.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. enter b. Click OK. for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical . 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt.26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Check None. lighting. click (Open). Click OK. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Electrical Fixtures. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). select the PP-2B panel. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click Training Files. 4 In the Filter dialog. Circuits are used for power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. and for Category. and data systems. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

rfa. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. under Electrical . 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. and in the right pane. enter 2.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. select Wiring. for Hot Conductors. 19 Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. and click Element Properties. and in the drawing area. select Long Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 13 Select the wire again. and click Open. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 15 In the Load Family dialog. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.

24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click to select the circuit. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Creating Power Loads | 209 . select the PP-2B panel. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns.26 Press Delete. 28 In the drawing area. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown.

on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. click Training Files. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 3 In the Electrical space. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. In the left pane of the Open dialog. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. click Open. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. select panel LP-2B. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Finally. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase.

11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 1-#12. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Under Electrical-Loads.3712 VA. Click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 1-#10. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Phase B 3636 VA. Notice that the loads on Phase A. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Scroll down. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. click Rebalance Loads.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 6 Click OK. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 1-#12. enter 30A. for Rating.3616 VA). and Phase C . 1-#10. 14 Close the warning dialog. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Click OK. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you create a panel schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Loads. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 25A. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 .rvt. under Electrical . Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. enter 30A.15 Select panel PP-2B. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Rating. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog.Loads. for Rating. 17 Close the warning dialog. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. and click OK. click Training Files. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click (Open). Select PP-2B.

9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Panel Schedules.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Font Size. enter 1/8. select Berlin Sans FB. Under Header Text. click Edit. select Bold and Italic. 11 Click OK twice. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Under Body Text. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Font Size. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. enter 3/32. and open E601 . 7 Select the schedule. Under Header Text. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i.rvt. click (Open). 4 Close the report. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. for Appearance. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. for Font. expand Sheets (all). under Other.

Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 .View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. each with a load of 180VA. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. In the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. select space Lounge 212. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Expand Unassigned. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. press TAB once. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Panel. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 16 Close the details dialog. under Warnings. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 15 In the dialog. zoom to space Electrical 214. 17 In the drawing area. select MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

click Training Files. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and click Properties. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . right-click PVC . type PVC . In this exercise. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 4 In the Name dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 219 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. In this lesson.Vent. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. planning is critical to a successful design. in addition to loading existing families. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a PVC pipe type. and click OK. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. click Duplicate. Adding a pipe size.rvt.Sanitary. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i.

enter 27/32''. click Pipe Settings. under Mechanical. Cross. enter -4' .DWV. PVC . 21 In the right pane. select None. In the Project Browser. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. and click OK. under Pipe Types. 27 For the new pipe size. 24 For Inside Diameter.PVC . enter 1/2''.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 15 For System Type. 13 In the right panel. for Material. 25 For Outside. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. select Tee Vent . Tee. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. enter 5/8''. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click New Size. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 10 On the Selection panel. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.Vent is listed. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . click Training Files. 17 In the left pane. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Plastic.rfa. select Sanitary. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch.PVC . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Sanitary. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. for Nominal. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 18 For System Type.DWV: Standard.0''. Tap. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.Sch 40 . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .Sch 40 . For Offset. enter 10°. 26 Click OK. click Modify.PVC .Sch 40 . and click Main.DWV: Standard. 6 Click OK. select Tee.

including plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. sanitary piping. Create the hot water system. Create the cold water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . add a hot water heater.

and verify that Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. you add 2 toilets. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.rvt. NOTE To identify a space name and number. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 1 urinal. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. including the men’s room (space Male 107).Design is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.Flush Valve . and 3 sinks. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel. in the Type Selector. against the left wall.Wall Mounted. 5 On the Placement panel.1. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 1 wall-mounted urinal.6 gpf.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. as shown. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. under Water Closet . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. select Public .

and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. under Urinal . 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . (Again. above the first in the standard toilet space.

click Place on Face. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Placement panel. 14 Click Modify. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.2'' Drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain .Rectangular.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and review the components listed under this system. and click View ➤ Piping. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and a floor drain. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder.rvt. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. click Training Files. In this exercise. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). a urinal.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 16 Click the title bar for the browser.

Plumbing Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 6 In the plan view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and click OK. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and verify that Level 1 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 2 In the Project Browser. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design is open. 8 In the Filter dialog. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . so the Create Sanitary System is available. expand Sanitary. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Systems Browser. enter Sanitary 107. If you deselected the drain.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. click Finish Editing System. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. for System Name. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed.

A preview of the piping layout displays.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. as shown. and click OK. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 16 In the Select a System dialog. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . for example. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select one of the components in the system. a toilet. select Sanitary 107. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The base is placed.

and for Offset. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 25 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 27 Click Modify. and click OK. select Branch. 26 On the Options Bar. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. and modify it to meet project requirements. 21 On Options Bar. and click Settings. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter -4'-0”. 23 For Offset. for Slope. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Offset. enter -1' 0''. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select 4''. enter -1' 0''. for Solution Type. for Diameter. select Main. You accept this suggested solution. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. select Intersections. click Solutions. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.19 On the Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 24 In the left pane.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .30 In the 3D view. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. 31 Click Modify.

33 Using the previous method. click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 38 Close the file with or without saving it. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown.

select 22''x22'' . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. click Training Files. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.rvt.Public.Rectangular. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Design is open. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel.Plumbing Plan . in the Type Selector. under Lavatory . 4 On the Element panel.

7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. TIP When entering dimensions. For example. select Multiple. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. On the Options Bar. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. 8 Select the sink. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. enter 2' 4''. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .

Press Esc. and press Enter to create the third sink. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Add To System. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 16 On the Edit System panel.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Finish Editing System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 In the System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.In the System Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Draw Pipe. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 21 Select the tee. 20 Select the fitting. double-click 3D Plumbing. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 22 In the plan view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . with the tee fitting selected.

enter 2' . for Slope.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. enter 1/8'' / 12''.6''. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. for Offset. 24 On the Options Bar. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click to draw the pipe. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. and click Apply. In this example.

Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . click to place the fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 31 Click Modify.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard.DWV. 29 In the Type Selector. under Wye 45 Deg Double .PVC . move the cursor over the stub pipe. and when the vertical center line displays. 32 Select the double wye fitting. 30 In the 3D view.

double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. for Offset. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. you add pipe segments to the double wye. on the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. 36 In the section view. enter 6''. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. enter 1'. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. right-click the right connector. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. and press Enter. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. 48 Click Modify.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. and click Draw Pipe. press Spacebar. 46 In the section view. and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. 49 Using the same method. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. right-click the bottom connector.

56 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify.Sch 40 . under Trap P . 55 In the 3D view.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select the P-Trap on the left. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select Standard. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 52 In the plan view. 53 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.PVC .

and press Enter. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify. select the left P-Trap. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Move the cursor to the left.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. In the plan view. Click in the plan view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. connect the right sink to the double wye.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. under Pipe Types. In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select a proposed solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. as shown.■ In the 3D view. select PVC Sanitary. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.

You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.rvt. click Finish. and verify the slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 62 On the Options Bar. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. for Slope. click Training Files.

DWV.Plumbing Plan .Design. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. and click the intersection to place the fitting. as shown. 3 In the Section view. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 5 Select the tee. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. right-click the top connector. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Sch 40 . and click to draw the pipe. select the vertical stack. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Modify. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Floor level line.PVC .Overall. and click Draw Pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. select Standard.Design. 7 On the Selection panel. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 In the 3D view.

14 On the Options Bar. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 17 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .PVC .11 Click Modify.DWV. as shown. 18 In the plan view. 13 Click the rotate control once. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 12 Select the fitting. under Plug . 15 Press Esc. select Standard. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1'-0”. for Offset.

A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.Plumbing Plan . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.rvt.Design is open. click Training Files. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.19 Click Modify.

To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 9 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .) 10 Click OK. select Pipe Types: Water. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 15 In the plan view. 7 In the left pane. For Offset. and click Main. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. minimize the Sanitary system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and sinks. select Branch. enter 9' 3''. click Check None. for System Type. select Domestic Cold Water. select Pipe Types: Water. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.Overall. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 14 In the System Browser. select Domestic Hot Water. and for System Type. urinal. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Plumbing Fixtures. 4 In the right pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. if necessary. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. double-click 3D Plumbing . For Offset. 6 In the left pane. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Branch. expand Unassigned. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. for System Type.Design ➤ 3D Views. select Main. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. verify that the value is 9' 0''. draw a selection box to select the toilets. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog.

Notice that the water main displays in blue. For Flow Conversion Method. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. enter DCW 107. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. In the System Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 21 On the Edit System panel. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click Edit System. click Finish Editing System. 19 On the System Tools panel. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

35 In the Type Selector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. for Offset. and click to place the pipe. 37 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. as shown. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 7''. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. as shown. under Pipe Types. For Slope. For Offset. enter 10'. and click the connector. and press Enter. enter 0”/12”. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. select Water. 34 In the plan view. connect the second toilet. 28 In the Type Selector. 31 On the Options Bar. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. click to the left of the urinal. for Offset. enter 3' . and press Enter.2 7/8''. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. select the sink above the urinal. enter 4'0”. right-click the top DCW connector. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 30 In the plan view.25 Using the same method. 33 Click Modify. select 3/4''.

42 In the Select Connector dialog.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click to connect to the main cold water line. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 41 Select the top sink. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 40 Click Modify. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click OK. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).

45 Close the file with or without saving it. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. add a water heater. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.44 Using the same method. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . select the 3 sinks. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Overall. expand the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. 5 In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Plan . while pressing Ctrl.

(The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 15 In the System Browser. Default Domestic Cold Water. In later steps. Default Domestic Hot Water. and click Edit System. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). enter Domestic Hot Water 107.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. When designing systems. 14 Click Modify.6 Gallon. and click OK. 10 In the System Browser. under Water Heater . 13 In the plan view. in the Unassigned folder. select 0. as shown. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. for System Name. you edit the system to add equipment. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that DCW 107 is selected. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Selector. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.Tankless.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water.

24 Move the cursor up. enter 1' 6''. 27 Click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. and click the water main line. Slope: 0''/12''. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . verify that Automatically Connect is selected.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. as shown. for Offset. select the water heater. 22 In the Type Selector. right-click the middle left connector. and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right. click Finish Editing System. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 25 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit System panel. enter 10’. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 19 Select the water heater. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. and select Draw Pipe. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. Offset: 4' 6''.

as shown. enter 1''. select a sink. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. enter 1' 6''. select Domestic Hot Water 107. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. enter 9' 0''. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 30 On the System Tools panel. 33 On the Edit System panel. and on the Placement Tools panel. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 36 Move the cursor down. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and for Offset. click Finish Editing System. for Offset. click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and in the System Selector. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. select 4'-6''. and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor to the right. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe.

40 On the Options Bar.39 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. and click just above the bottom sink. as shown. enter 1’. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . for Offset. 42 Click Modify. 41 Move the cursor down.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. 2 Right-click Standard. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. You create a new pipe type. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. However. you can choose to save your work. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. go to http://www. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. 267 .rvt. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this tutorial. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and click Duplicate.autodesk. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. In this lesson.

3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). and click Properties. select Fire Protection Wet. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. In the left pane. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. or architectural components. For Pipe Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that 9' 0" is selected. Next. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. However. select Fire Protection Wet. select Main. for Material. structural beams. 6 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. under Mechanical. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. For Offset. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For System Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For System Type. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you create project parameters and work with schedules. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. and enter Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. select Carbon Steel. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. duct. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. click Rename. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 9 Click OK. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views.

and click Element Properties. enter Sprinkler Zone. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. 8 Using a crossing window. select space Instruction 221 as shown. for Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. right-click. When you highlight a space using the cursor. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.rvt. For Group parameter under.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . Under Categories. 6 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Spaces. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click Training Files. and then click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. select the upper half of the building. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Zone 1. select Fire Protection. 5 Click OK twice. the space crossing lines display.

and then access instance properties. 13 Using the same method. under Fire Protection. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. including a calculated value parameter. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Zone 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. to which you add various parameters.rvt. and then click OK. and click OK. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK. verify that only Spaces are selected. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Sprinkler Zone. select Zone 1.

8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 14 Select the new header. The schedule displays. 9 On the Formatting tab. double-click on each column separator.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. enter Light. Select Schedule keys. select Feet and fractional inches. For Units. 10 In the Format dialog. select Maximum Spacing. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. click the Formatting tab. enter Maximum Spacing. enter 15.Design is highlighted. 7 Click OK. For Group parameter under. For Name.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. For Key name. Obstructed-Combustible. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. for Name. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Length. 6 Using the same method. In the Maximum Spacing column. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Click OK. select Fire Protection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Add Parameter. and click Field Format. indicating that it’s the active view. For Type of Parameter. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Rounding. Click OK. select Spaces. select To the nearest 1'. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice.Fire Protection Plan . and on the ribbon.

enter 130. Unobstructed Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary. select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. and press Enter. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE The units of measure display automatically. under Available fields. enter Sprinkler Schedule. For Name.

Select Header and Blank line. select Number. select Common. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 .■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. Click OK. For Formula. select 0 decimal place. and click Field Format. In the Fields dialog. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. under Other. For Type. and click View Properties. click Edit. select Sprinkler Zone. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. and click OK. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Area. For Discipline. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 22 Click OK twice. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Units. For Rounding. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Then by. select Level. click . In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. for Sorting/Grouping. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Fixed. for Sort by. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

For Fields. verify that Use default settings is selected. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. and then select Hidden field. For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Number. click Edit. right-click the schedule. select Level. 30 Click OK twice. select Level equals Level 2.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Sprinkler Zone. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Minimum Sprinklers. for Filter by. and then click Field Format. For Then by (second instance). 27 In the drawing area. and select Totals only. for Filter. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. select Grand totals. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click View Properties. ■ In the Format dialog. select Hidden field.

and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . Under Field formatting. and Count. select Embedded Schedule. On the Formatting tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Grand totals. and click View Properties. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Embedded Schedule. select Count. and select Totals only. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Fields. click Edit. under Other. double-click Type. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. delete the word Maximum. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Sprinklers. System Name. select Calculate totals. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. for Available fields. For Category. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group.

When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK. select space 221 Instruction. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. under Identity Data.Fire Protection Plan Design. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. but their values are not determined. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. and access the instance properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . double-click FP . 46 With the space still selected. for Protection Area Construction Type. select space 221 Instruction. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. Unobstructed. select Ordinary. and click OK. 43 Click Cancel. select Light. As a result. select Ordinary. 44 In the schedule. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. 48 In the floor plan. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.rvt. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you place the sprinklers. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. methodology. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. As you create the system.autodesk. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you can choose to save your work.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. By following the recommended workflow. After finishing each exercise.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. If the tutorial training files are not present. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. At the end of this tutorial. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. go to http://www. However. and double-click Level 2 . click Training Files. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. 279 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. When there is a small misalignment. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. After placing the initial sprinkler.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 3 In the Project Browser. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.

11 In the drawing area.Pendent . as shown. select the sprinklers that you placed.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and select Sprinkler . 10 Press Esc twice. 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.

verify that Constrain is cleared. Next. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Also. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. you place non-hosted sprinklers.

23 Right-click the sprinkler. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. enter 11. and click Element Properties. and press Enter. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Notice that the schedule updates. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Number. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. specify a vertical offset. 200B. you place non-hosted sprinklers. you adjust the offset. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. for Offset. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and 200C). and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. move the cursor to the right. This number is determined in the schedule. enter 14' 6". 17 In the Project Browser. 25 Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Adding Sprinklers | 283 . it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 29 Press Esc. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.Design. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. under Constraints. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown.FP_Ceiling view. enter 10' 6". 18 Type WT. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 19 In the floor plan.Fire Protection Plan . Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. open Design ➤ FP . Next.

Unlike logical connections (systems). This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. and with piping (physical connection). click Training Files. Creating a Piping System In this exercise.Design is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. In this exercise.Fire Protection Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. However.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . After creating the logical connection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.30 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt.

as shown. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. As you assign sprinklers to systems. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 5 Right-click the header. click View ➤ Systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. In the System Browser. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. within the Piping Systems folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and select Piping. Creating a Piping System | 285 . Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected.

and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. For Offset. For Pipe Type. indicating the logical connection. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.Wet is selected. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. 14 Click Finish Editing System. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. click Settings.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. and on the Options Bar. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. and click Select. The Generate Layout tools are activated. select an initial piping layout. 11 With the system still selected. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 15 In the drawing area. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. for System Name. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. system equipment. verify that Main is selected. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. In the left pane. 19 Click OK. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Next. providing system editing tools. and a piping layout preview displays. 13 In the System Browser. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 12 On the Options Bar. and select the system. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. select Branch. press Tab. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and number of elements in the system. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. The Edit Piping System panel displays.

The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. as shown. 23 For Offset. enter -12' 0". Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). click Place Base. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.20 On the Generate Layout panel. When the layout is finished. for Diameter. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and select solution 5. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). 22 On the Options Bar. verify that Network is selected. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. In general. select 2".

A (parallel movement control) displays. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . On the Generate Layout panel. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 29 Click Finish Layout. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. click Modify.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 32 If necessary. the Connect Into tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. and various manual pipe creation tools.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. select a different layout solution. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . Either relocate the system components. or that offset elevations are incorrect. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. or manually modify the pipe. and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Next.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

1 In the Project Browser. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 If necessary. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.

verify that Solutions is selected. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 13 Click Finish Layout. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. air terminals. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and so on) are logically connected by a system. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. and select solution 5. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 9 On the Edit System panel. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. mechanical equipment. for Solution Type. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 8 In the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 5 In the drawing area. 14 Close the System Browser. click Add To System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers).The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. you can select the pipe or duct. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. radiators. and pipe or duct is created. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. verify that Network is selected. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel.

and then tile the views. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 25 Select the sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 27 On the Options Bar. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 24 In the Piping Plan. and click Draw Pipe. 21 In the Piping Plan. 29 Using the same method. select 9'. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 23 View the result in the 3D view.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 28 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and then press Esc.

31 In the plan view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . Because the whole system highlights.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.

rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan .Design is highlighted. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . double-click on the section head to open the section view. 4 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. select 1/4" = 1'-0". ■ 6 Press Esc. for Scale. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . for Diameter.21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".

26 Using the same method.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. and maximize the floor plan. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select 1 1/4". change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). for Diameter. as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. 23 Close the 3D view.

27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. For additional practice. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this exercise. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You added tags to pipes. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. In this tutorial. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. you created a wet fire protection system.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. 305 .

306 .

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. matchlines. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. click Training Files. and view references. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. right-click Copy of Level 1. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Properties. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and apply a view template.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.rvt. If the view included detail graphics. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. 307 . dependent views. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.

You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 4 Using the same method. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. create dependent views for areas B and C. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. and then press Esc. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. views and put them on the sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. as shown. 10 In the drawing area. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 9 Click OK. more focused.rvt.

click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . and click OK. on the Options Bar. select Double Dash 5/8". 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. For Line Weight./ ---). Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. For Line Pattern. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select 11. for Target view. 20 Select the upper view reference and. In the Color dialog. select black. 13 Press Esc twice. 19 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 21 Using the same method. click the current value. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 14 Click Finish Matchline.

and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and zoom to each of the view references. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. as shown.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 27 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 25 Using the same method.

Click OK. 2 Zoom in. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.29 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click to select it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Plumbing Isometric . for View Classification. select Documentation. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Default View Template. for View Name. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. The section crop lines no longer display. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. right-click 3D Plumbing. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Properties. select Plumbing Isometric. 6 In the Project Browser. For Sub-Discipline. Under Graphics. click Training Files.Domestic Water. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. enter Plumbing Isometric . you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run.rvt. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.Domestic Water. and select the section box. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise.

12 Using the same method. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and then click OK.9 Right-click. For Pattern. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select Dash. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select 3. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. 14 Right-click.

15 Press Esc. and click to select it. On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. Right-click.Sanitary Waste. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. press Tab 3 times.Domestic Water view with detailing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Reveal Hidden Elements. In the drawing area. 18 Using methods learned previously. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

click on the Format value. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. as shown. 21 Click OK twice. Creating Callout Views | 315 . When the view is associated with a sheet. and click to place the spot slope annotation. For Slope. 25 Press Esc twice. In the Format dialog. and then place the callout view on a sheet.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. verify that Common is selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. select To the nearest 1/8". the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. for Rounding.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. select 1/4"=1'-0''. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. for Scale. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.

Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. for Line Weight. under Sheets (all). change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 13 In the Project Browser. using the same method. select 5. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. double-click M601 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. drag it to the sheet.

and click Apply Default View Template. right-click the callout view. For Default View Template.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser. for View Name. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click OK. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Title on Sheet. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. and select the viewport. enter WSHP PART PLAN.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. 25 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. under Names. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click Rename. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click OK. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.

you learn how to: ■ add text notes. linetypes. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. symbols. and annotation to create a legend. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. duct tags. 321 . ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.

under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 With the text still selected.rvt. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. as shown. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. click Training Files. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

15 On the Options Bar. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. and then click Right Straight. 16 In the drawing area. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. a return diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. Creating Annotations | 323 . a segment of round duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice.

navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 24 On the Options Bar.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. If necessary. and click Open. click Load. 20 In the Tags dialog. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. 17 Click Modify. 22 In the Tags dialog. and click OK. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. under Category.rfa.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. for Ducts. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 21 In the Load Family dialog.

select Horizontal. 26 On the Options Bar. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 325 . 31 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.25 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and Attached End. and then press Esc.

select Free End. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 34 In the drawing area. as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar.

That’s because you changed a type property. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and all elements of that type are affected. for Leader Arrowhead. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 37 In the drawing area. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and click OK. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.36 Press Esc twice. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Using the method learned previously. and lock lighting fixtures. lay out. select the last tag placed. not simply an instance property. select Dot Open 1/16".

In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Press Esc. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. and then select the interior face of the wall. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures.rvt.

annotation symbols. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and offset them 8' from the wall. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 16 Press Esc. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . and notes. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend | 329 .13 Using the same method. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. linework. and press Enter. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.3 1/2"). Because the dimensions are locked. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. enter 8'. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click the 3 interior locks on the line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 19 Using the same methods. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line.

Click OK.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. click Training Files. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Diffuser Legend. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. For View.rvt. select 1/4" = 1' -0".8 Neck.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Floor Plan. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For Scale. ■ 9 In the drawing area. 10 Using the same method.

11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 331 .

open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 21 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP and its text note. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. and then click Modify. Creating a Legend | 333 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.30 Select Spot Elevation . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND.

40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

Detailing 15 In this lesson. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. and text. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A drafting view using detail components. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A detail callout that references another view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.113 East elevation view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. detail groups. indicating that it’s the active view. 335 .

336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select each of the 2 panelboards. 7 Drag the Power Riser . and then modify and align the views. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Next. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. place Power Riser . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. and click to place it.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. 5 In the drawing area. clear Leader. 8 Using the same method. 4 On the Options Bar.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet.

and click OK. under Identity Data. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet. 13 Right-click. and click Deactivate View. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. right-click. giving the appearance of a single view.9 Press Esc. select the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the Level 1 line.

right-click. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Activate View. as shown. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. select the 113 East elevation view. In the next exercise. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 21 Using the drag control. 19 Select the Level 1 line. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. you add wiring to the diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 22 Press Esc. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. right-click. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise.

Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. for Line Weight. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . click Training Files. verify that Chain is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that there are no snaps active. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. for Name. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area.rvt. 8 On the Options Bar. as shown. Under Modify Subcategories. expand Lines. enter Electrical Power. 2 Close the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted.113 North view. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. click New. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. As you draw. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then click OK. select 6.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and click OK. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. In the New Subcategory dialog. In the Line Styles dialog.

13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. enter 1/8". add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). as shown.10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset.

19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. 29 Click Modify. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple.31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 33 On the Options Bar. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

42 On the Options Bar. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and press Enter. enter 3/32". 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard.36 Press Esc. 40 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. You enter exact values for each line length. 39 Move the cursor to the right. enter 0 0. for Offset.5.

49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and then press Esc. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. for Name. 50 With the group selected. 47 In the drawing area. and click OK. enter Ground. Using the same method. while pressing Ctrl. you can ensure that they stay together. 46 In the Project Browser. click on the length dimension value. select all 3 lines. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and press Enter.125.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. enter 0 0. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. Press Esc. expand Groups ➤ Detail.25.

54 Select the group.51 Using the method learned previously. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . TP-2B. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 52 Select the detail group.

enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click Rename. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. for Name. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and will place it on sheet E01. In later exercises. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 2 Right-click the copy.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. click Training Files. and click OK. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. 5 Zoom in to view the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components.

click Home. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . Back.6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge. and then press Esc. 7 On the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top.

Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Walkthroughs. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Apply View Template. select 3D Views. Click OK. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. right-click. Under Names. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. select 3D HVAC Iso. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Typical. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . 19 Complete the text labels.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. and click to specify the second leader point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Move the cursor down and to the left. (Right).

23 Click on the crop region. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 25 Click OK. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select Crop Region Visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. under Extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown.To rotate and reposition a text label. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and under Extents.

3 In the Project Browser. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click Properties. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . select 3" = 1'-0". Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click the view name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.29 In the drawing area. Place a detail component. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. For Scale. click Training Files. select the isometric view. Use detail lines to create a detail group.rvt. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view.

4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. select Documentation. for Sub-Discipline. For View Classification. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click the point at the top of the drain. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Click OK. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 9 Zoom in to the component. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as the rectangle start point. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 On the Element panel. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Plumbing. 13 In the drawing area. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". as shown.

17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.I. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. select C. 21 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Concrete. (Line). and then press Esc. for Type. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 18 With the filled region still selected. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.P. 22 Click Modify. and click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then click to select them. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. select Multiple. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 34 Press Esc. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.28 Click Modify. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 40 Click Finish Region. as shown. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 45 Using the method learned previously. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. and then press Esc. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. (Rectangle).38 Pan to the other end of the slab.

D.. and then click to select them.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and click OK. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. enter Flashing Membrane_F. draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog. for Name. press Tab to highlight the chain. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. as shown. select the Flashing Membrane group. 49 Click Modify.

55 Press Esc. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 61 Using the same method. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown.

select Leader and Free End. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.62 Press Esc twice. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 71 Click Modify. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. and then click OK. 67 On the Options Bar. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. and use the grips to resize the masking region. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 72 If necessary. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.

80 Press Esc twice. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the text insertion point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. and click to specify the second leader point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Drafting Detail Components | 361 .

84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

90 Press Esc. and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and click to place it. select the view title. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select Auto-Detect. for Line Weight. For Colors.rvt. you import a CAD detail drawing. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For A-----NPP. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select 3. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD.dwg. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select Black and White. Click Open. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. select Visible. For Import units. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. Click OK. For Layers.

14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . select the viewport title.8 Type ZF. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 In the drawing area. and then press Esc.

366 .